624655
397
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/400
Next page
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
2014 500L
14BF-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
500L
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or
use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.Your percep-
tions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle.This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not
ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications,and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon
itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing &
Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by
Chrysler Group LLC.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .............................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................151
5
STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................205
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ..............................................281
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................311
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .................................................363
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ........................................371
10
INDEX ....................................................................381
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ........................4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to
our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers:
the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity
the range of additional services available to FIAT Group
Automobiles customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
studio knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front floor pan under the passenger seat, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ..............12
Ignition Switch ........................12
SENTRY KEY® .........................13
Replacement Keys .....................14
General Information ....................14
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED . . .15
To Arm The System ....................15
To Disarm The System...................16
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device)
If Equipped ...........................16
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ............18
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........18
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............18
Replacing The Battery In The Key With
Remote Control........................19
Programming Additional Transmitters........19
Request For Additional Remote Controls ......20
General Information ....................20
DOOR LOCKS ..........................20
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open . . .23
2
Auto Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) .....23
Child-Protection Door Lock System
Rear Doors ...........................23
POWER WINDOWS .....................24
Power Window Switches .................24
LIFTGATE ............................27
Liftgate Emergency Release ...............27
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS .................29
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions .....32
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....35
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......35
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)
If Equipped ..........................36
Energy Management Feature ..............37
Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................37
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................38
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........39
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bags .............................39
Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........42
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....46
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............56
Child Restraints .......................57
Transporting Pets ......................74
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....75
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS ..........................76
Transporting Passengers..................76
Exhaust Gas .........................76
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ..........................77
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................80
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key simply press the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch can be turned to three different
positions:
STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical
devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system,
etc.) can operate;
AVV: engine start-up;
MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that
requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the
engine does not start, before the starting operation can be
repeated.
Mechanical Key Release Button
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
1 STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 AVV (START)
2 MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized studio.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
3. The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approxi-
mately 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
After approximately 16 seconds, the Vehicle Security
Light will flash slowly. This shows that the Vehicle
Security Alarm is fully armed.
The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed
by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors,
hood and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second
time even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly
closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the
system. Contact your authorized studio.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device)
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to
break-in attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device
each time you park your car.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly
double-pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not acti-
vate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside the
passenger compartment by entering the car through, and
then closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
carrying out the door unlocking operation (pressing
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter;
by turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
Safe Lock Device Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at
an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp, this is
to indicate that a door is still ajar.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With
Mechanical Key Release Button
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
press button A fig. 16 and open the metal insert B;
turn the screw C to Unlock using a fine bit screwdriver;
take out the battery case D and replace the battery E
making sure that polarities are correct;
refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it turning
the screw C to Lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be disposed of, as specified
by law, in the special containers, otherwise take them to
an authorized studio, which will deal with their disposal.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized studio for details.
Fig. 16
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls. Should
a new remote control be necessary, go to an authorized
studio, taking an ID document and the car ownership
documents.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
DOOR LOCKS
Press the central LOCK/UNLOCK button. The button
has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked
or unlocked.
LED ON: doors locked. Pressing the central LOCK/
UNLOCK button once will unlock all doors. The LED
will switch off once the doors are unlocked.
LED OFF: doors unlocked. Pressing the central
LOCK/UNLOCK button once will lock all doors. The
LED will switch on once the doors are locked.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmit-
ter, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by
pressing central LOCK/UNLOCK button.
NOTE: With central locking active (LED ON), opening
one of the front doors, it is possible to perform a central
unlocking (LED OFF). With central locking active (LED
ON), in order to open one of the rear passenger doors, it
is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice. With
one of the rear door open (LED OFF), the unlocking is
performed only for that door, not for all the vehicle.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must pull
the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the
door handle a second time to open the door.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Central LOCK/UNLOCK Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING! (Continued)
For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the vehicle
OFF, apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-
sion into REVERSE, and remove the Key Fob from
the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock
your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible locking the vehicle through the RKE,
internal button or external key pawl, also if one or more
doors are open. At lock command request, LED is
switched ON. At closing of the last door, the vehicle
maintains the central locking status if key is not inserted
in Ignition Device, otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked
and the LED will be switched OFF.
NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch,
but is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize
the presence of the key and after the closing of last door,
the vehicle remains locked.
Auto Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON),
if a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF),
as soon as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED
ON).
Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate
clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise
to UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock
the doors using the central unlock button, roll down the
window and open the door using the exterior handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door, which operate the front passenger win-
dow and a single switch on each rear door that operates
the rear passenger door window. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
A — Driver Front Window
Switch
D Driver Rear Window
Switch
B Passenger Front Window
Switch
E Passenger Rear Window
Switch
C Window Lockout Switch
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled
to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Press
the window switch for approximately one second, re-
lease, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
If Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or activate the central locking button
located on the instrument panel below the radio.
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate electronic release
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Liftgate Emergency Release is
built into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the
Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats
completely
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
3. With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow color.
(A)
4. Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to
trigger the release tab of the trunk (follow the direction
arrow to open)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating posi-
tions
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Front seat belts incorporate dual pretensioners that
may enhance occupant protection by managing occu-
pant energy during an impact event
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for Children (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to “LATCH Child Seat Anchorage
System (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children).”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment
can cause severe injury or death to infants in that
position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in
If You Need Consumer Assistance.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Al-
ways buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized studio immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
N/A Not Applicable
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combi-
nation lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front and rear outer seating
positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a head-on collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with dual pretensioning devices that are de-
signed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. The dual pretensioning devices are located
on the lower B-pillars and in the kick plate area. These
devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by
assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in
a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 6 mph (10 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized studio. FIAT Group Automobiles does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert®. BeltAlert® can also be
enabled through the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Setup Menu”.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
word AIRBAG is embossed on the air bag covers. In
addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted under the instrument
panel below the steering column.
NOTE:
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced
Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the
air bags to have different inflation levels based on several
factors, including the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABIC is labeled AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Advanced Driver Air Bag
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized studio immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Knee Impact Bolster
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Passenger Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers,
placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant,
that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries.
The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows
on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side
collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle dam-
age for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending
on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air
Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/
LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system
is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized studio service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located under the instrument panel trim beneath the
steering column. When the ORC detects a collision
requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is gener-
ated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way
allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag
fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supple-
mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through
small vent holes in the side of the air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air
bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), depending on the severity and type of collision.
In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on
the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 mil-
liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
System Reset Procedure
After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road
you must follow the system reset procedure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually).
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec-
onds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC - if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of
the vehicle.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna-
sium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see
your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized studio
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized studio for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized studio. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized studio.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized studio service
the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside
the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized studio if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
N/A
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, all.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for
using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint,
up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed,
if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, all.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be
twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist
the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized stu-
dio. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized studio.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized studio for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
MIRRORS .............................85
Inside Day/Night Mirror ................85
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . .86
Conversation Mirror If Equipped .........87
Power Mirrors ........................88
Folding Mirrors........................89
Heated Mirrors If Equipped ............89
Sun Visors ...........................89
SEATS................................90
Front Seats ...........................90
REAR SEATS .........................96
HEAD RESTRAINTS ...................101
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD ......104
LIGHTS .............................106
Multifunction Lever ....................106
Headlights ..........................107
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped .....107
High Beams .........................107
Flash-To-Pass ........................108
Parking Lights .......................108
3
Turn Signals .........................108
Lane Change Assist ...................108
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........108
Front Fog Lights If Equipped ...........109
Interior Lights .......................109
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......112
Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........112
Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............114
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .116
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........117
To Activate ..........................118
To Set A Desired Speed .................118
To Deactivate.........................119
To Resume Speed......................119
To Vary The Speed Setting ...............119
To Accelerate For Passing ................119
REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ........120
Rear Park Assist Sensors ................121
Rear Park Assist Alerts..................121
Failure Indications .....................123
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .......123
Park Assist System Usage Precautions .......123
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................126
Turning ParkView® On Or Off With
Uconnect® 5.0 ........................128
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkView® On Or Off With
Uconnect® 6.5/6.5N ...................128
Turning Camera Delay On Or Off ..........128
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED . . .129
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .130
Programming A Rolling Code .............130
Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........133
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......134
Using HomeLink®.....................135
Security ............................135
Troubleshooting Tips ...................136
General Information....................137
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED ........138
To Open ............................139
To Close ............................139
Wind Buffeting .......................140
Power Sun Blind ......................140
POWER OUTLETS ......................140
CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED ..........142
CUPHOLDERS ........................143
STORAGE ............................144
Glovebox Storage......................144
Front Center Armrest Storage If Equipped. . .145
CARGO AREA FEATURES ................146
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES ........146
REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............147
Rear Window Defroster .................147
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED .......148
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conversation Mirror If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the
overhead console.
To gain access to the conversation mirror, pull downward
on the mirror to the open position.
Conversation Mirror Location
Conversation Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Controls
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors.
Sun Visor (Driver Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position.
SEATS
Front Seats
Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out-
board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Height Adjustment Lever
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Power Lumbar If Equipped
Press the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar
support. Release the switch when you reach the desired
position.
A — Power Lumbar Switch
B Heated Seat Switch
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the outer side of the seat.
A — Power Lumbar Switch
B Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
REAR SEATS
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
Adjusting Bar
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seat.
Seatback Release Lever
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the seatback forward. 3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side
of the seat and lift upward on the lever.
Seatback Folded
Seatback Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the
seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback
into position.
Rear Armrest If equipped
To use the armrest, lower it downward.
Folding Rear Seat
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
Armrest Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints If Equipped
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re-
straints, the outboard head restraints have two adjustable
positions and the center head restraint can be stowed
when the seat is not in use. When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position which can be done by pulling upward on the
head restraint.
To raise the head restraints, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraints, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupy-
ing a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Push Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released to open
the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red
safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The
safety catch lever is located under the center front
edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Catch Lever
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Multifunction Lever
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off using the
display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc-
tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on
the high beams. Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to turn off the high beams.
Headlight Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the
lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just below the radio.
Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console,
press the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
On/Right Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Press the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are
turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and
press the switch to the left to turn on the left light.
Off/Left Position
Center Position
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated.
When the key is removed from the ignition (within two
minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second
timer is activated.
When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 second
timer is activated.
When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated.
NOTE:
The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Map/Reading Light Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes.
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Windshield Wiper Lever
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers
will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
in intermittent mode when the rear window wiper is
not operating;
in synchronous mode (at half the speed of the rear
window wiper) when the rear window wiper is
operating;
in continuous mode with reverse engaged.
With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function, as de-
scribed for the windscreen wiper.
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Rear Window Wiper Operation Rear Window Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located on the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 RES + 2 ON/OFF
4 SET - 3 CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica-
tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and
recommendations.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the au-
dible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the car during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 in (30 cm) away.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’
field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the
distance decreases.
Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm)
Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Menu Functions”
for further information).
Failure Sensor or System
failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
Icon appears on display.
Message is displayed on multifunction display
(where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if
the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal
is turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display
shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavail-
able, without reference to the sensor in failure condition.
If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be
disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized studio.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
view image shall not be displayed for more than 5 sec-
onds and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will
help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Turning ParkView® On Or Off
With Uconnect® 5.0
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off
ith Uconnect® 6.5/6.5N
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn
the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
Turning Camera Delay On Or Off
When you are in the “Safety & Assistance” screen there is
an option to turn the Camera Delay on or off.
Press the check box soft key next to “Camera Delay” to
enable/disable. The default is checked at every key On
cycle.
NOTE: A clear ‘X’ exit button will be placed in the
bottom left corner while the user is in Drive and camera
delay is active.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the camera delay is active, and the vehicle is
shifted into Drive, the camera images will remain on
the screen for 10 seconds, the vehicle reaches 8 mph
(13 km/h), or until the ‘X’ is pressed. The user is then
taken back to their last Radio state. If camera delay is off,
the user will be taken directly to their last Radio state
once in Drive. When the vehicle is in Drive and the
vehicle speed reaches between 9 mph (15 km/h) to
11 mph (18 km/h) the camera images will remain on the
screen overlapping the text Max speed reached” being
displayed.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sunvisor
designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The
HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 Door Opener
2 Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position,
HomeLink® will remain active for three minutes. During
this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink® is disabled.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with
an electrically operated sun blind.
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be
operated only with the ignition key turned to the ON/
RUN position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are
located in the overhead console.
A — Power Sunroof Switch
B Power Sun Blind Switch
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
To Open
Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position.
Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for approxi-
mately one second and release, the sunroof will open
fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and hold
the power sunroof switch for approximately one second.
NOTE: During Express close any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Blind
Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move
towards the rear part of the car, until it is fully open.
With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch
and the blind will move towards the front part of the car,
until it is fully closed.
NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing
stages, if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it
will stop the blind movement.
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger compartment power socket
The power outlet is located on the central tunnel, in front
of the shift lever, between the two cupholders. It only
operates with the ignition key at MAR/ON.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On models with optional smoker’s kit, the cigar lighter
takes the place of the power socket (see Cigar lighter
paragraph).
Luggage compartment power socket
This is located on the left side of the luggage compartment.
It only operates with the ignition key at MAR/ON.
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Passenger compartment power socket
Luggage compartment power socket
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the central tunnel, next to the hand-
brake lever. To activate the cigar lighter, press button A.
After a few seconds the button automatically returns to
its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
NOTE:
Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W
to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder
located in the center armrest.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove-
box which is located on the right side of the instrument
panel. Pull outward on the door latch to open either
glovebox and push the upper door down to close it and
the lower door upward to close it.
Upper And Lower Glovebox Storage Compartment
Glovebox Storage
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Center Armrest Storage If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage compartment.
To open the storage compartment push in the upper
release latch on the front of the armrest.
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage area.
The front center armrest can also be lifted up and
adjusted in three positions, this is done by pushing the
lower release latch.
Armrest Upper Release Latch
Front Center Armrest Raised Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-
down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES
The rear cargo area has a upper shelf which allows for
additional storage below the cargo floor.
To raise the cargo floor lift it up by the handle and place
it in the rear housing which is located behind the rear seat
back.
Rear Housing For Cargo Floor
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear cargo area is equipped with two storage bins
located on the both sides of the cargo area along with two
cargo hooks.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with
the climate controls on the instrument panel. Press
this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Storage Bin And Cargo Hook
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs
that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........153
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................154
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....155
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................166
EVIC Screen .........................167
EVIC Control Buttons ..................167
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................168
Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........169
Trip Computer .......................170
Trip Button ..........................170
Trip Functions ........................172
Values Displayed ......................172
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)............................173
Uconnect® RADIOS .....................181
iPod®/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA PLAYER
CONTROL ...........................181
4
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......182
Radio Operation ......................183
Player Operation ......................183
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........183
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .184
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................184
Manual Climate Control System ...........184
Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System
(If Equipped).........................190
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 Side Vent 7 Fixed Upper Air Vent 13 Climate Controls
2 Radio Controls Behind The Steering Wheel 8 Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 14 USB Port/SD Card/AUX Socket
3 Multifunction Lever Light Control 9 Upper Glove Compartment 15 Uconnect® Audio System
4 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 10 Storage Compartment 16 Ignition Switch
5 Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer 11 Lower Glove Compartment 17
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag/Horn
6 Central Air Vents 12 Upper Switch Bank 18 Electronic Cruise Control Located
On Steering Wheel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
2. Cruise On Indicator If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel.”
3. Cruise SET Indicator If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel.”
4. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indicator
Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation /
Malfunction Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on,
see your authorized studio as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the ESC system or TCS system become
active.
NOTE:
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
6. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the Brake Warning Light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized studio.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
7. Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear win-
dow defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
8. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gallon
(7.6L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
9. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately
update accurately when refueling with the engine on.
10. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exte-
rior turn signal, when using the turn signal
lever.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the
temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized studio
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
12. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The
engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
13. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
14. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home
(Headlight Delay) Indicator If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow
Me Home feature is activated this indicator
will illuminate and the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will show how long the function
remains active. For further information, refer to “Follow
Me Home” in “Understanding The Features of Your
Vehicle”.
15. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor
Failure DST system failure.
16. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
17. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
18. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
studio as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
19. Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Light
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light tells
the driver and front passenger when the front passenger
air bag is turned off. The PAD Indicator light illuminates
the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the front
passenger air bag will not inflate during a collision
requiring air bags. When the right front passenger seat is
empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat,
the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the
PAD indicator light is not illuminated
20. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Vehicle Security Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly
recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes
on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn
the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is
still locked, try again with the other keys that come with
the vehicle. Contact an authorized studio if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running the warning light flashes, this
means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor
device. Contact an authorized studio to have all the keys
programmed.
22. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII,
that monitors engine and automatic transmission
control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
23. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
24. Glow Plug Light If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the
ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 sec-
onds. An externally powered electric engine block heater
is available as optional equipment or from your autho-
rized studio.
The message Plug In Engine Heater, will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
25. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and
“Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).”
26. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door
is located on the right side of the vehicle.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized studio for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized studio.
28. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized studio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
29. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
When the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
position, the warning light will illuminate mo-
mentarily. If the warning light stays on, cycle the ignition
to the OFF position and back to ON/RUN. If the warning
light stays on, contact your authorized Fiat Studio.
If the warning light switches on while driving you may
not have steering assistance. Although it will still be
possible to steer the car, the effort needed to operate the
steering wheel could be increased: contact an authorized
Fiat Studio as soon as possible.
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating”
for further information.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
System Status
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Outside Temperature Display
Trip Computer Functions
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Screen
The EVIC will display the following:
Time
Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers
Outside temperature
Gear Indicator
Odometer (display of distance travelled in miles/
kilometers)
Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice on
road, etc.)
EVIC Control Buttons
The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument
panel below the radio.
Press the MENU button briefly to access the menu
and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu
option. Press and hold the MENU button (approximately
one second) to return to the main screen.
Press the UP
button to scroll upward through the
displayed menu and the related options or to increase the
displayed value.
Press the DOWN
button to scroll downward through
the displayed menu and the related options or to de-
crease the value displayed.
NOTE: UP
and DOWN buttons activate different
functions according to the following situations:
To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
To increase or decrease values during settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock, the external temperature
and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/
markets, where provided) for a few seconds.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. The menu includes the following functions:
Speed Beep
Trip B Data
Dimmer
Autoclose
Units
Language
Buzzer Volume
Daylights (D.R.L.)
Hill Start
Low Tire Pressure
Exit Menu
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
Briefly press the MENU button to select the main menu
option to set.
Press the UP
or DOWN button (by single presses)
to select the new setting.
Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting and
go back to the main menu option previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With
Submenu
Briefly press the MENU button to display the first
submenu option.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP or DOWN button (by single presses)
to scroll through all the submenu options.
Briefly press the MENU button to select the displayed
submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu.
Press the UP
or DOWN button (by single presses)
to select the new setting for this submenu option.
Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting
and go back to the previously selected submenu option.
Press and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
A short button press displays the different values.
A long button press resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
New Trip
To reset:
Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset
automatically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, press and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the SET ESC button for longer
than one second.
Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu
screen or press and hold the SET ESC (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without storing
settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
Trip distance A
Average consumption
Instant consumption A
Average speed A
Travel time A (driving time).
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
Trip distance B
Average consumption B
Average speed B
Travel time B (driving time).
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” can-
not be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance Travelled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Consumption
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instant Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable
of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust-
ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly.
NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may
change while travelling following an event that causes
switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice
versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on
avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP
or DOWN button to set the
required brightness level.
2. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen or press and hold the MENU (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Speed Beep (Speed Limit)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
immediately alerted.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. The display will show
the message (Speed Beep).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select speed
limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the
MENU button to display the presently set activation
speed. Pressing the UP
or DOWN buttons
selects the speed limit. Press MENU to confirm selec-
tion.
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph
or km/h, depending on the selected unit. The setting will
increase/decrease by five units each time the UP/DOWN
button is pressed. Press and hold the UP/DOWN button
to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting
by briefly pressing the button when you approach the
required setting.
Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” will flash on the
display.
2. Press the DOWN
button. “Off” will flash on the
display.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Display
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display
feature, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. “MPH”, “km/h”,
then “Off” will flash on the display (according to
previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select display
deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen.
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select the
setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month -
year).
To change the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button and “year” will flash
on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button and “month” will flash
on the display.
4. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
5. Briefly press the MENU button and “day” will flash
on the display.
6. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the UP
or DOWN button is pressed.
Press and hold the UP
or DOWN button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by
briefly pressing the button when you approach the
required setting.
Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically lock
at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1.
Briefly press the MENU button “On” or “Off” will flash
on the display (according to the previous setting).
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit
in three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel
Economy.”
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button to display the three
sub-menus.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to navigate the
three sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press
the MENU button.
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press
the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear on
the display (according to the previous setting).
5. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
6.
Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-
menu.
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly
press the MENU button. Either “mpg,” “km/l or
“l/100km” will appear on the display (according to
the previous setting).
If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in “mpg.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
1. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
2.
Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-
menu.
3.
When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
press the MENU button. Either “°F” or “°C” will appear
on the display (according to the previous setting).
4. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting.
5.
Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-
menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or
press and hold the MENU button (approximately one
second) to go back to the main screen without storing the
settings.
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish and Turkish.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. The previously set
“language” will flash on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. The previously set
volume “level” will flash on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert®
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
Automobiles studio has deactivated the BeltAlert® sys-
tem. Refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
BeltAlert®” in “Occupant Restraints” for further infor-
mation.
To reactivate this function, proceed as follows:
Press the UP
or DOWN button briefly; Off
will flash on the display. Press the or UP or DOWN
button and On will appear;
Press the SET ESC button briefly to return to the
submenu screen or hold the button down to return to
the main menu screen without saving.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate / deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1.
Briefly press the MENU button to display the three
sub-menus.
2. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
3. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
4. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the button (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or press and hold the button (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the main
screen.
Press the
button to return to the first menu option
(Speed Beep).
Press the
button to return to the last menu option
(Daylights).
Uconnect® RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port or an SD Card (6.5 Only) to
be plugged into the SD Card slot
Refer to the Uconnect® 5.0/6.5 User’s Manual for iPod®,
external USB or SD Card device support capability.
1 SD Card Slot (6.5 Only)
2 USB Connector
3 AUX/Cable Jack
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
Player Operation
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the Player. Pressing the bottom of the switch
once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to
the beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1.
Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control System
Controls
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials, an inner push knob and two push buttons.
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Recirculation Control
Push this control button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
3. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
4. A/C Button
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
5. Rear Defrost Control
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
6. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demister outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
Rear Window Defrosting
Press, and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
The activation of the function is indicated by the rear
defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching
on. The function is automatically deactivated after
20 minutes.
For versions/markets where provided, press the rear
defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and
heated rear window (for versions/ markets, where pro-
vided).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Air Recirculation
Press and release the Air Recirculation button, so that the
LED on the button switch is on, to enter recirculation
mode. It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation
on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the
introduction of polluted air.
Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if
there are many passengers on board, to prevent the
windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions more
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the
internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the win-
dows misting.
Air Distribution Selection
Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of
the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger
compartment:
Air flow to the front windshield, front side win-
dow and front/rear footwell diffusers.
Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This
air distribution allows the passenger compart-
ment to be heated quickly.
Air flow distributed between central and side
dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.
Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passen-
ger’s body).
Air flow to windshield and side windows.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the climate control system com-
pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation
is set to outside air (LED on Recirculation Control
button off ). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
the windows. The user can always set air recirculation
and climate control system compressor.
Additional Electric Heater (If Equipped)
The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen-
ger compartment heating.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following
conditions are verified:
outside temperature low;
engine coolant temperature low;
engine on;
fan speed set to 1st speed;
Temperature Control knob turned completely clock-
wise to red section.
The heater is switched off when at least one of the
conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at a Fiat Studio before the
summer.
NOTE: The system uses R134a coolant which does not
pollute the environment in the event of accidental leak-
age. Under no circumstances use R12 fluid which is
incompatible with the components of the system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Controls
1. Driver Temperature Control
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
2. Recirculation Control
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will
flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not proceed
to this mode due to fogging risk.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation
indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If
the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation set-
ting is manual and Recirculation is ON.
3. Rear Defrost Control
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
4. A/C Control
Press and release the A/C Control Button to change the
current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is
ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C
indicator will turn OFF.
5. ON/OFF Control
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual opera-
tion. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower
Control adjustment knob.
7. Blower Control Indicator LEDs
LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed.
8. Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
9. Front Defrost Control
Press and release the Front Defrost Control button to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Perform-
ing this function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. The blower speed may increase when
Defrost mode is selected. If the front defrost mode is
turned OFF, the climate system will return to the previ-
ous setting.
10. Passenger Temperature Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature.
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control
knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
11. SYNC Button
Press the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
12. AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Description
The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates
the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in
two zones: driver side and passenger side.
The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com-
partment and compensates for possible variations in
external climate conditions.
The climate control system can recognize extremely cold
(or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart-
ment and consequently provide optimal management of
the system’s capabilities.
NOTE: The reference temperature is 71.6° F (22° C) for
optimal comfort management.
The automatically controlled parameters and functions are:
air temperature at the driver/front passenger side vents;
fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow);
compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying
the air);
air recirculation.
All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat-
ing the system, selecting one or more functions and
modifying their parameters.
Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the
system will only override the settings for safety reasons.
Manual selections always take priority over automatic
ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pressed or
the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
The amount of air introduced into the passenger com-
partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by
the fan, which is controlled electronically.
The air temperature is always automatically controlled
according to the temperature set on the display (except
for when the system is off or in certain conditions when
the compressor is not running).
The system allows the following to be set or adjusted
manually:
driver/passenger side air temperature;
fan speed (continuous variation);
air distribution to seven positions;
compressor enablement;
rapid defrosting/demisting function;
air recirculation;
heated rear window;
system deactivation.
NOTE: The climate control system detects the passenger
compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem-
perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror
and protected by a specific cover. Obstructing the field of
view of this sensor with any object could cause the
climate control system to operate with less than optimal
efficiency.
Switching On the Climate Control System
The climate control system can be switched on in differ-
ent ways: it is advisable to press the AUTO button and
turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this way the system operates completely automatically
to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of
the air introduced into the passenger compartment. It
also manages the air recirculation function and the acti-
vation of the air conditioning compressor.
During automatic operation, you can change the set
temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any time
by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will
automatically change the settings to adjust to the new
requirements.
During completely automatic operation (AUTO), varying
the air flow and/or distribution (which are not dis-
played) causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and
the system to operate in MANUAL mode (displaying
both the flow and distribution requested).
When the compressor is deactivated, the AUTO operation
remains active only if the system can guarantee in-car
comfort. Otherwise, the system switches to MANUAL
mode (the set temperatures will flash on the display). The
fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger
compartment.
Adjusting The Air Temperature
Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger
Temperature Control, dial clockwise or anti clockwise,
to adjust the air temperature in the front left (Driver
Temperature Control) or right (Passenger Temperature
Control) zone of the passenger compartment.
The set temperatures are shown on the displays.
Press the SYNC button to align the air temperature
between the two zones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return
to the separate management of air temperatures in the
two zones.
Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or
the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO
(maximum cooling) functions respectively.
To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob
to the desired temperature.
Air Distribution Selection
By pressing the Mode Control buttons (Up/Down/Right
arrows), it is possible to set one of the seven possible air
distributions manually:
Up Arrow Air flow to the windshield and front
side window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting. When the
defrost mode is selected, the blower will automatically
default to medium-high.
Right Arrow – Air flow at central and side dashboard
vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot
season.
Down Arrow – Air flow to the front and rear footwell
diffusers. This air distribution setting heats the passen-
ger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sen-
sation of warmth.
Right/Down Arrows Air flow distributed between
footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side
dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution setting
is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Up/Down Arrows Air flow distributed between
footwell diffusers and windshield and front side win-
dow defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting al-
lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effec-
tively and prevents the windows from misting.
Up/Right Arrows Air flow distribution between
windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central
dashboard vents. This allows air to be sent to the
windshield in conditions of strong sunlight.
Up/Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distribution to all
diffusers on the car.
NOTE: Air always flows from the side dashboard diffus-
ers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow by
operating the wheel located near the corresponding
vents.
In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically
manages air distribution (the LEDs on the Mode Control
buttons are off ).
When set manually, the air distribution is indicated by
the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on.
In combined function mode, functions are enabled to-
gether with those already set when the relevant button is
pressed. If a button whose function is already active is
pressed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding
LED switches off.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a
manual selection, press the AUTO button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pressed (LED on button lit) the
climate control system automatically adjusts the follow-
ing settings in the corresponding zones:
quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the
passenger compartment
climate control system compressor
air recirculation
cancelling all previous manual adjustments.
This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button
switching on.
If the AUTO button is pressed when the AUTO LED is
on, the system switches to completely manual mode; it
displays the current flow and distribution status, which
will no longer be managed automatically.
If a manual intervention is made on at least the air
distribution or on the fan speed, the LED switches off to
indicate that the system is no longer controlling all
functions automatically.
Deactivating the compressor results in the deactivation of
automatic operation only if the system is no longer able
to guarantee comfort conditions (which depend on the
set temperature).
NOTE: Should the system no longer be able to guarantee
the required temperature set in various passenger com-
partment zones, the set temperature value will flash for a
few seconds on the display.
To restore automatic system control after one or more
manual adjustments, press the AUTO button.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button (LED on button lit) to align the
passenger side air temperature with that of the driver
side.
This function makes temperature regulation easier when
the driver is travelling alone.
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the
passenger side temperature and return to separate air
temperature management.
Air Recirculation
The Air Recirculation is managed according to the fol-
lowing operating logics:
forced activation (air recirculation always on): indi-
cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button;
forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air
intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the
Recirculation Control button switching off.
Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by press-
ing the Recirculation Control button.
When the On/Off button is pressed, the climate control
system automatically activates internal air recirculation
(LED on Recirculation Control button on).
It is still possible to activate outside air recirculation (LED
on the button off ) and vice versa, by pressing the
Recirculation Control button.
In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto-
matically by the system according to outside environ-
mental conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
NOTE:
The engagement of the recirculation system makes it
possible to reach the required heating/cooling condi-
tions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting up inside (espe-
cially if the climate control system is off ). When the
outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off
(air drawn in from the outside) to prevent the win-
dows from misting up.
It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when
the outside temperature is low, since the windows
could mist up rapidly.
Climate Control System Compressor
Press the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button switching on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
switched off, even after the engine has stopped.
When the compressor is switched off, the system deacti-
vates air recirculation to prevent the windows from
misting up. In this case, if the system is capable of
maintaining the required temperature, the AUTO LED
does not switch off.
The temperatures will flash seven times and the AUTO
LED will switch off if the required temperature cannot be
maintained.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To restore automatic control of compressor engagement,
press the A/C Control button again or press the AUTO
button.
With compressor off:
if the outside temperature is higher than the set one,
the climate control system will not be able to satisfy the
request.
The fan speed can be reset manually.
With the compressor on and the engine running, manual
ventilation cannot be lower than the minimum speed
(only one LED lit).
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Moreover, under certain
environmental conditions, windows could mist rapidly
since the air is not dehumidified.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-DEF function)
Press the MAX-DEF button to activate (LED on button
on) the windshield and side window demisting function.
The climate control system carries out the following
operations:
switches on the air conditioning compressor when
environmental conditions are suitable;
switches air recirculation off;
sets maximum air temperature (HI) in both zones;
sets fan speed according to the engine coolant
temperature;
directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers;
activates the heated rear window;
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
activates the heated windshield (for versions/markets,
where provided);
displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED
lit).
NOTE: The Front Defrost Control (MAX-DEF) function
remains on for about three minutes from when the engine
coolant reaches the appropriate temperature.
When the function is activated, the LED on the AUTO
button switches off. With the function activated the only
possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed
and turning the heated rear window off.
When the Recirculation Control, Rear Defrost Control , or
AUTO buttons are pressed, the climate control system
will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield dis-
tribution activates the climate control system compressor
(LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation is set to
outside air intake (LED on the recirculation button off ).
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
It is, however, always possible to manage air recirculation
and the climate control system compressor manually.
Rear Window Defrosting
Press the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear
window defrosting.
The effective activation of the function is indicated by the
rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel
switching ON.
This function switches OFF automatically after about
20 minutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not
switched on automatically the next time the engine is
started.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For versions/markets where provided, press the Rear
Defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and
heated nozzles (for versions/markets, where provided).
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Switching Off The Climate Control System
Press the On/Off button.
With climate control system off:
air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger
compartment from the outside;
the compressor is off;
the fan is off;
the heated rear window can be activated/deactivated.
NOTE: The climate control system control unit stores the
temperatures set before the system was switched off and
restores them when any button of the system is pressed
(except for the A/C Control button).
To restart the climate control system in fully automatic
mode press the AUTO button.
Additional Heater (If Equipped)
This allows the passenger compartment to be heated
more quickly in cold weather conditions.
The heater switches off automatically when the required
comfort conditions are achieved.
The additional heater activates automatically depending
on the environmental conditions and with engine started.
NOTE: The heater only operates if the outside tempera-
ture and engine coolant temperature are low. The heater
will not activate if the battery voltage is too low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES ................209
Manual Transmission If Equipped ........209
Automatic Transmission If Equipped ......209
Normal Starting.......................209
Cold Weather Operation ................210
Extended Park Starting..................210
If Engine Fails To Start .................211
After Starting ........................211
Turbo Charger “Cool Down” .............211
MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED. . . .212
DOWNSHIFTING .....................213
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
IF EQUIPPED..........................214
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............216
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .216
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........216
Transmission Limp Home Mode ...........226
AUTOSTICK® IF EQUIPPED ............227
Operation ...........................227
5
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........229
Acceleration .........................229
Traction ............................229
DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............230
Flowing/Rising Water ..................230
Shallow Standing Water .................230
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............232
PARKING BRAKE ......................232
BRAKE SYSTEM .......................234
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .234
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .236
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............236
Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............236
Traction Control System (TCS) ............237
Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................238
DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE ..........239
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........239
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light ............240
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........243
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............244
Tire Markings ........................244
Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........247
Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........249
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........250
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION.........254
Tire Pressure ........................254
Tire Inflation Pressures .................255
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .257
Radial Ply Tires ......................257
All Season Tires If Equipped ............258
Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped. . .258
Snow Tires ..........................258
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel If Equipped ............259
Compact Spare Tire ....................259
Tire Spinning ........................260
Tread Wear Indicators ..................261
Life Of Tire .........................261
Replacement Tires .....................262
TIRE CHAINS .........................264
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....265
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) .......................266
Base System .........................269
General Information ...................272
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1.4L Turbo ........272
Reformulated Gasoline .................273
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............273
MMT In Gasoline .....................274
Materials Added To Fuel ................274
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Fuel System Cautions...................274
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............275
ADDING FUEL ........................276
TRAILER TOWING .....................278
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............279
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle .............................279
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is available as
optional equipment or from your authorized studio.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
NOTE: Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil
and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is
important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfac-
tory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position,
wait 10 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat
the Extended Park Starting procedure.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third.
Shift Pattern (Six-Speed)
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below the
gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE (R)
position.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
During cold weather, until the transmission lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
DOWNSHIFTING
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), or in a location
accessible to children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the OFF position, and once
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not), then press
the brake pedal and the shifter release button on the shift
lever.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal and the shifter release button
on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of the PARK
position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, press the button on
the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The
electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise
shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever downward
(+) or upward (-) while in the AutoStick® position (next
to the Drive position) will manually select the trans-
mission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch auto-
matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar
to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become
familiar with some of the normal operational character-
istics of the DDCT:.
During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
the transmission.
Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
warning message will display in the Instrument Clus-
ter if cool down actions are needed.
When stopped on an incline, always hold the vehicle
in place using the brakes. On steep inclines, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
is normal and will not damage the transmission. When
frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds,
use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®”
in this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During
extremely cold temperatures, the transmission will not
operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmission
in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal operation
will resume once the transmission oil is sufficiently
warm.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
GEAR NOT
AVAILABLE
In AutoStick® mode, the
gear selected by the driver
is not available due to a
fault condition. See your
authorized studio for diag-
nosis and service.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SHIFT NOT
ALLOWED
The gear position requested
by the driver is currently
blocked. This occurs if
NEUTRAL is requested
while moving (with the
throttle opened), if
REVERSE is requested
while moving (at 6 mph
[10 km/h] or faster), if
DRIVE is requested while
moving backwards (at
6 mph [10 km/h] or faster),
or if 3rd gear or higher is
requested at a stop. Make
sure the vehicle is stopped
before engaging DRIVE
or REVERSE.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SHIFT TO
NEUTRAL
THEN D or R
The transmission has shifted
itself into NEUTRAL (due
to a fault condition, or over-
heat due to excessive idling
when stopped in DRIVE
with the brakes released),
but the shift lever remains
in gear. Shift into NEU-
TRAL and then back into
gear for continued driving.
If the transmission will not
re-engage, see your autho-
rized studio.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
AUTOSTICK NOT
AVAILABLE
AutoStick® mode is
unavailable due to a shift
lever fault. See your autho-
rized studio for diagnosis
and service.
AUTOMATIC MODE
NOT AVAILABLE
The transmission is unable
to shift itself automatically,
due to a fault condition.
Use the AutoStick® mode to
shift the transmission
manually. See your autho-
rized studio for diagnosis
and service.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
REDUCE GEAR
CHANGES
The transmission pump is
overheating. In AutoStick®
mode, try to drive in one
specific gear as much as
possible, avoiding frequent
gear changes. In DRIVE,
the transmission will
automatically modify its
shift schedule to reduce the
number of shifts.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
TRANS. GETTING
HOT PRESS BRAKE
The transmission driving
clutch is overheating,
usually due to repeated
launches in stop-and-go
traffic. Pull over and allow
the transmission to cool in
NEUTRAL until “TRANS.
COOL READY TO DRIVE
(If Equipped)” is displayed.
TRANS. HOT STOP
SAFELY SHIFT TO P
The transmission driving
clutch has overheated.
Pull over and shift the
transmission into PARK and
allow the vehicle to cool
until “TRANS. COOL
READY TO DRIVE
(If Equipped)” is displayed.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
TRANSMISSION
A transmission fault has
been detected. See your
authorized studio for
diagnosis and service.
SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been
detected. See your autho-
rized studio for diagnosis
and service.
ENGAGE PARK
BRAKE
The sensor that confirms
PARK engagement is
not functioning properly.
Engage the parking brake to
ensure that the vehicle will
not roll when in PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized studio for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized studio at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized studio has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized studio
service is required.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK® IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rear-
ward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in
snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear
after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever
rearward (+) once or twice.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep
will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to a automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
If the system detects a problem, it will disable
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centi-
meters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety
and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON and
the engine started. The steering allows the force required at
the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving conditions.
NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
steering functionality can be achieved after a few sec-
onds.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the side button with your thumb, then
lower the lever completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
1 Parking Brake Release Button
2 Parking Brake Lever
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized studio immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example; repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during
brake use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS
if the fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions and
are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)” in this section for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
Vehicle must be stopped.
Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety
level of the whole car.
In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, brak-
ing with different grip conditions), through the DST
function the ESC system controls the steering to imple-
ment an additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct manoeuvre to the
driver.
The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases
the safety and car control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the car.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized studio as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-
tion.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ECS system is reduced.
ESC Off Switch
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 Maximum Load
2 Size Designation
5 Maximum Pressure
3 Service Description
6 Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
EXAMPLE:
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
R means radial construction
D means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI
(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire infla-
tion pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the
sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on
the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Tire and Loading Information Placard
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle studio for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat,
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
The puncture is no greater than ¼ (6 mm)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
Summer tires will not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Use Security Chain Company (SCC) SCC Z6 low
profile or equivalent chains on 185/55R15 tires only.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if dif-
ferent from the speed recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F
(20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message
will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3.
However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
(Single)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. For optimum
performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or
higher is recommended.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appro-
priate octane rating for your engine) before considering
service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as 10% Ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are
required in some areas of the country during the winter
months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels
blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
MMT In Gasoline
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized studio for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
WARNING! (Continued)
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the spare tire
area) to open the flapper door to allow for emergency
refueling with a gas can.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Funnel Location
Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........283
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............283
TIREFIT KIT ..........................284
TIREFIT Storage ......................285
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation .....285
TIREFIT Usage Precautions...............286
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT ..............288
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
IF EQUIPPED .........................294
Jack Location ........................294
Spare Tire Removal ....................295
Preparations For Jacking ................296
Jacking Instructions ...................297
Spare Tire Stowage ....................302
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ............302
Preparations For Jump-Start ..............303
Jump-Starting Procedure ................304
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE..............306
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................308
6
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........309
Automatic Transmission .................310
Manual Transmission ...................310
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL ............310
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways slow down.
In city traffic while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the rear cargo area on the
left side.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
TIREFIT Components
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use. After each use, always replace these
components immediately at an authorized studio.
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
tended to seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
WARNING! (Continued)
TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case
of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
ing.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the
ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
2.
Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 -
70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the
vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar), the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized studio or tire
service center.
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized studio as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized studio or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The spare tire jack and TIREFIT are both located in the
rear cargo area underneath the cargo floor.
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area
on the outside of the car.
1– Tow Eye
2– Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
3– Jack
4– Jack Handle
5– Tirefit Kit
6– Emergency Flashlight
7– Emergency Screwdriver
Spare Tire Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch.
2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to
lower the spare tire.
3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
Winch Location
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jack-
ing position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the traingular lift point
symbols on the sill molding).
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating
notches on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star
pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice. The correct tightness of each wheel bolt is
95 ft/lb. (128 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
Spare Tire Stowage
Reverse instructions of the spare removal section.
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click
is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side
of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Positive Terminal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull upward
on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery explo-
sion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
NOTE: Before connecting to the discharged battery you
must first disconnect the negative (-) cable from the
discharged battery as this is the only way to successfully
jump start the vehicle.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the disconnected negative (-) cable on the
discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative cable (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized studio.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and
REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently press-
ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Press the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ESC
Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved
out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever bezel and move up to the top of the shift
lever .
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override release
lever in.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
Automatic Transmission
Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Manual Transmission
Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located on top
of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the
filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System
refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating in
this manual.
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1.4L TURBO . . . .313
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II . . .314
REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................314
STUDIO SERVICE ......................315
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ............315
Engine Oil ..........................316
Engine Oil Filter ......................319
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................319
Maintenance-Free Battery ................320
Air Conditioner Maintenance .............321
Body Lubrication .....................325
Wiper Blades ........................326
Adding Washer Fluid ..................329
Exhaust System ......................329
Cooling System ......................332
Brake System ........................338
Manual Transmission If Equipped ........340
Automatic Transmission If Equipped ......341
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................343
7
FUSES ..............................349
Underhood Fuses......................349
Interior Fuses ........................352
Rear Interior Fuses.....................354
VEHICLE STORAGE ....................355
REPLACEMENT BULBS .................356
BULB REPLACEMENT ..................357
Headlamps ..........................357
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps.......................357
Front Fog Lamps ......................358
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............358
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................358
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .358
FLUID CAPACITIES .....................359
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................360
Engine .............................360
Chassis ............................361
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1.4L TURBO
1 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Battery 7 Coolant Pressure Cap
2 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Oil Fill Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).”
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized studio for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
STUDIO SERVICE
Your authorized studio has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
CAUTION!
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized studio or qualified
repair center.
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full
end of the indicator range.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for tur-
bocharged engines under all types of operating condi-
tions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-10896.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil
has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity - 1.4L Turbo (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized studio, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized studio
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized studio or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter
access door to the HVAC housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
5. Open the air filter access door.
6. Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Press the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly press the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
1 Wiper Blade
2 Release Button
3 Wiper Arm
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 Wiper Blade
2 Blade Pivot Pin
3 Wiper Arm
4 Wiper Blade Holder
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Cooling System
WARNING!
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration
at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system.
See your local authorized studio for service.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Manual Transmission If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid speci-
fications.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission com-
ponents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized studio
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit your authorized studio immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your au-
thorized studio immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized studio has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and
filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
If the engine compartment is washed with an high
pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches
(20 centimeters) from filler surface.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized studio has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp
Blue
Body Controller
F02 60 Amp
Blue
Body Controller
Rear Distribution
Unit
F03 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp
Orange
Anti-Lock Brake
Pump
F05 70 Amp
Tan
Electric Power
Steering
Front Distribution Unit
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F06 30 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan -
Low Speed
F07 50 Amp
Red
Radiator Fan -
High Speed
F08 40 Amp
Orange
Blower Motor
F09 7.5 Amp
Brown
Transmission
F10 15 Amp
Blue
Horn
F11 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
F14 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet 115V
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F15 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission
F16 7.5 Amp
Brown
Transmission
Powertrain
F17 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
F18 5 Amp
Tan
Powertrain (Multi-
air If Equipped)
F19 7.5 Amp
Brown
Air Conditioning
F20 30 Amp
Green
Rear Defroster
F21 15 Amp
Blue
Fuel Pump
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F23 20 Amp
Yellow
Anti-Lock Brake
Valves
F24 7.5 Amp
Brown
Stability Control
System
F30 5 Amp
Tan
After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp
Tan
PTC (Secondary)
F82 40 Amp
Orange
Transmission
F83 40 Amp
Orange
PTC (Primary)
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F84 7.5 Amp
Brown
Transmission
F85 15 Amp
Blue
Front Power
Outlet 12V
F86 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Power Outlet
12V
F88 7.5 Amp
Tan
Heated Mirrors
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp
Brown
Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp
Brown
Front and Rear
Ceiling Lights
Trunk and Door
Courtesy Lights
3 F53 7.5 Amp
Brown
Instrument Panel
Node
4 F38 20 Amp
Yellow
Central Door
Locking
5 F36 15 Amp
Blue
Diagnostic Socket,
Car Radio, Climate
Control System,
TPMS, Sunroof
Fuse Panel
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
6 F43 20 Amp
Yellow
Bi-Directional
Washer
7 F48 20 Amp
Yellow
Passenger Power
Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp
Brown
Left Low Beam,
Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5 Amp
Brown
Airbag
10 F51
5 Amp
Tan
Car Radio Switch,
Climate Control
System, Stop Light,
Clutch, Reverse
Gear, Sunroof,
Parking Sensor,
Rear Camera
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
11 F37 7.5 Amp
Brown
Stop Light Switch,
Instrument Panel
Node
12 F49 5 Amp
Tan
Exterior Mirror,
GPS, Electric
Mirror, Parking
Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp
Tan
Climate Control,
Seat Regulation
14 F47 20 Amp
Yellow
Driver Power
Window
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
Rear Interior Fuses
The rear interior fuse panel and is located on the driver’s
side in the rear compartment.
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 F61 15 Amp
Blue
Lumbar Regulation
Seats
2 F62 15 Amp
Blue
Heated Seats
3 F64 20 Amp
Yellow
Hi Fi System
4 F65 20 Amp
Yellow
Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp
Yellow
Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp
Brown
Left High Beam
Rear Fuse Panel
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
7 F91 7.5 Amp
Brown
Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp
Brown
Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp
Brown
Right Fog Light
10 F33 5 Amp
Tan
BSM, ESP
11 F34 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Left Passenger
Window
12 F49 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Right Passen-
ger Window
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High
Beam Headlamp
HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Bulb Number
Front Parking/Daytime
Running Lamps
W21/5W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
(See Authorized studio)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED
(See Authorized studio)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED
(See Authorized studio)
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp
LED
(See Authorized studio)
Front Fog Lamps H11
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Fog Lamps -
If Equipped
W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized studio.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
studio or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp
housing.
4. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized studio.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not serviced
separately. See your authorized studio for replacement of
these lights.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove the four screws (using a T20 driver) and
separate the backplate from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized studio
for replacement.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.1 Gallons 50 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
with Manual Transmission
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
ith Automatic Transmission
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant - 1.4L Turbo Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil - 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use API Certified 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10896.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter - 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs - 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.026in [.65 mm])
Fuel Selection - 1.4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission
Fluid
Automatic Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission
Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............364 Maintenance Chart ....................366
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot
or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate
as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder reservoir, and transmission as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension,
tie rod ends and boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings,
parking brake function.
XXXXXXX
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace Brake Fluid every
two years
XXXXXXX
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X X X X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve
if necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to per-
form a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................372
Prepare For The Appointment.............372
Prepare A List ........................372
Be Reasonable With Requests .............372
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............372
FIAT Customer Center ..................373
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............374
Service Contract ......................374
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............375
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............375
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................375
In Canada ...........................376
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............376
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .........377
Treadwear...........................378
Traction Grades .......................378
Temperature Grades....................379
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized studio, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized studio are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized studio.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized studio. They know your vehicle the best, and
372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized studio have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
studio service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized studio.
They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized studio is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Authorized studio name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242–6342
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased
a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized studio
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD,
for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group Automobiles
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
studio, and the manufacturer.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
376 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles
vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 377
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
378 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............334
Adding Fuel .............................276
Adding Washer Fluid ......................329
Additives, Fuel ...........................274
Airbag..................................39
Airbag Deployment ........................53
Airbag Light .............................47
Airbag Maintenance ........................54
Airbag, Side ..............................43
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ................43
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .319
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................321
Air Conditioning Filter .....................323
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................321
Air Conditioning System ....................321
Air Pressure, Tires.........................255
Alarm (Security Alarm)......................15
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................15
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................333
Capacities ............................359
Disposal ..............................336
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................234
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................165
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..........15
Appearance Care .........................343
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ...........15
Automatic Dimming Mirror...................86
Automatic Transmission ....................214
Adding Fluid ..........................342
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................343
Fluid Level Check .......................342
Fluid Type ............................341
Gear Ranges ...........................217
Special Additives .......................342
Autostick ...............................227
Auto Up Power Windows ....................25
382 INDEX
Battery.................................320
Jump Starting ..........................302
Belts, Seat ...............................77
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................325
B-Pillar Location ..........................250
Brake Assist System .......................236
Brake Fluid .............................361
Brake, Parking ...........................232
Brakes .................................338
Brake System ............................234
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................234
Master Cylinder ........................338
Parking ..............................232
Warning Light .........................156
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................216
Bulb Replacement .........................356
Bulbs, Light ..............................80
Camera, Rear ............................126
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........359
Capacities, Fluid ..........................359
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................310
Oil (Engine) ...........................318
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...................76
Cargo Area Features .......................146
Car Washes .............................344
Cellular Phone ...........................184
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............358
Chains, Tire .............................264
Changing A Flat Tire .......................294
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................245
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................161
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............76
Checks, Safety ............................76
Child Restraint ............................57
Child Safety Locks .........................23
Clean Air Gasoline ........................273
10
INDEX 383
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................345
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................326
Clutch .................................338
Clutch Fluid .............................338
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............183
Compact Spare Tire ........................259
Connector
UCI.................................181
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........181
Contract, Service ..........................374
Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................359
Cooling System...........................332
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............334
Coolant Level ..........................332
Disposal of Used Coolant .................336
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................332
Inspection ............................336
Points to Remember .....................335
Pressure Cap ..........................335
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............333
Corrosion Protection .......................343
Cruise Light .............................155
Cupholders .............................143
Customer Assistance .......................372
Data Recorder, Event .......................56
Daytime Running Lights ....................107
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................27
Defroster, Windshield .......................78
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................314
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................342
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................336
Door Locks ..............................20
Door Opener, Garage.......................129
Downshifting ............................213
384 INDEX
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................230
Electric Remote Mirrors......................88
Electronic Brake Control System ...............236
Brake Assist System .....................236
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............243
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........117
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............239
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......126
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................27
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................283
Jacking ...............................294
Jump Starting ..........................302
Towing ..............................309
Emergency Trunk Release ....................27
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................319
Break-In Recommendations .................75
Checking Oil Level ......................316
Compartment ..........................313
Cooling ..............................332
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................76
Fails to Start ...........................211
Flooded, Starting ........................211
Fuel Requirements ......................272
Oil..................................316
Oil Filler Cap ..........................318
Oil Selection ...........................317
Overheating ...........................283
Starting ..............................209
Temperature Gauge ......................157
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............51
Event Data Recorder ........................56
10
INDEX 385
Exhaust Gas Caution........................27
Exhaust System ...........................76
Exterior Lights ............................80
Filler Location Fuel ........................157
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................319
Air Conditioning .......................323
Engine Fuel ...........................360
Engine Oil ............................319
Engine Oil Disposal .....................318
Flashers
Turn Signal ............................80
Flooded Engine Starting.....................211
Fluid, Brake .............................361
Fluid Capacities ..........................359
Fluid Leaks ..............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................342
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........360
Fog Lights ..............................109
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat ...................98
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................306
Fuel...................................272
Adding ..............................276
Additives .............................274
Capacity .............................359
Clean Air .............................273
Cutoff ................................51
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................157
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................157
Gasoline ..............................272
Gauge ...............................157
Light ................................157
Materials Added ........................274
Octane Rating ..........................272
Requirements ..........................272
Tank Capacity ..........................359
386 INDEX
Fueling ................................276
Fuses ..................................349
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............129
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................273
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................272
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................273
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................157
Fuel .................................157
Odometer .............................164
Tachometer ............................159
Gear Ranges .............................217
Gear Select Lever Override ..................308
General Information ........................14
General Maintenance.......................315
Glass Cleaning ...........................347
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................230
Headlights ..............................107
Cleaning .............................347
High Beam ............................159
Passing ..............................108
Heated Mirrors............................89
Hill Start Assist...........................238
Holder, Cup .............................143
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............129
Hood Release ............................104
Ignition
Key..................................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................13
Infant Restraint ...........................57
10
INDEX 387
Information Center, Vehicle ..................166
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................85
Instrument Cluster ........................155
Instrument Panel and Controls ................153
Instrument Panel Cover .....................347
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............348
Interior Appearance Care....................346
Interior Lighting ..........................109
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................297
Jack Location ............................294
Jack Operation ...........................294
Jump Starting ............................302
Key, Replacement ..........................14
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................13
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................157
Lane Change Assist........................108
Latches .................................80
Lead Free Gasoline ........................272
Leaks, Fluid ..............................80
Life of Tires .............................261
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................27
Light Bulbs ..............................80
Lights ..................................80
Airbag ................................47
Anti-Lock .............................165
Brake Assist Warning ....................240
Brake Warning .........................156
Bulb Replacement .......................357
Center Mounted Stop ....................358
Engine Temperature Warning ...............158
Exterior ...............................80
High Beam Indicator .....................159
Low Fuel .............................157
388 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........161
Oil Pressure ...........................160
Park ................................108
Passing ..............................108
Seat Belt Reminder ......................159
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................15
Service ...............................357
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .161
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............162
Traction Control ........................240
Turn Signal ............................80
Wait to Start ...........................163
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......155
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................250
Locks
Child Protection .........................23
Door .................................20
Lubrication, Body .........................325
Maintenance Free Battery....................320
Maintenance, General ......................315
Maintenance Procedures ....................315
Maintenance Schedule ......................364
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......161
Manual, Service ..........................376
Manual Transmission ......................212
Fluid Level Check .......................340
Frequency of Fluid Change ................341
Lubricant Selection ......................340
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................338
Mirrors .................................85
Automatic Dimming ......................86
Electric Powered .........................88
Electric Remote .........................88
Heated ...............................89
Rearview ..............................85
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
10
INDEX 389
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................266
Multi-Function Control Lever.................107
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................75
Occupant Restraints ........................46
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ..................29
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................272
Odometer...............................164
Trip.................................164
Oil Change Indicator .......................169
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................169
Oil, Engine ..............................316
Capacity .............................359
Change Interval ........................317
Checking .............................316
Disposal ..............................318
Filter ................................319
Filter Disposal .........................318
Identification Logo ......................317
Materials Added to ......................318
Recommendation .......................317
Viscosity .............................318
Oil Filter, Selection ........................319
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................314
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............129
Operating Precautions ......................314
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Overheating, Engine .......................158
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............4
Paint Care ..............................343
Parking Brake............................232
Park Sense System, Rear ....................120
Passing Light ............................108
Pets....................................74
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........250
390 INDEX
Power
Mirrors ...............................88
Sunroof ..............................138
Windows ..............................24
Power Steering Fluid .......................361
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................39
Preparation for Jacking .....................296
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................37
Radial Ply Tires ..........................257
Radio Operation ..........................184
Rear Camera ............................126
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................27
Rear Window Features .....................147
Reclining Rear Seats ........................97
Recorder, Event Data .......................56
Recreational Towing .......................279
Reformulated Gasoline .....................273
Refrigerant ..............................322
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................38
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........182
Replacement Bulbs ........................356
Replacement Keys .........................14
Replacement Parts.........................314
Replacement Tires .........................262
Reporting Safety Defects ....................375
Restraints, Child...........................57
Rotation, Tires ...........................265
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................77
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................80
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................375
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................76
Safety Information, Tire .....................244
Safety Tips ...............................76
Schedule, Maintenance .....................364
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................348
10
INDEX 391
Seat Belt Reminder .........................38
Seat Belts ................................77
And Pregnant Women .....................39
Child Restraint ..........................57
Inspection .............................77
Pretensioners ...........................37
Untwisting Procedure .....................35
Seat Belts (Sedan) ..........................29
Seats
Fold and Tumble Rear .....................98
Reclining ..............................92
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)..................15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................13
Service Assistance .........................372
Service Contract ..........................374
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .161
Service Manuals ..........................376
Shift Lever Override .......................308
Side Airbag ..............................49
Signals, Turn .............................80
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................264
Snow Tires ..............................258
Spare Tire...............................259
Spark Plugs .............................360
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................117
Speedometer.............................155
Starting ................................209
Automatic Transmission ..................209
Cold Weather ..........................210
Engine Fails to Start .....................211
Manual Transmission ....................209
Steering
Tilt Column ...........................116
Wheel, Tilt ............................116
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............182
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .182
Storage ................................355
Storage, Vehicle...........................355
392 INDEX
Storing Your Vehicle .......................355
Stuck, Freeing............................306
Studio Service............................315
Sun Roof ...............................138
Sun Visor Extension ........................90
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........39
Tachometer..............................159
Telescoping Steering Column .................116
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............157
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)..................15
Theft System (Security Alarm) .................15
Tilt Steering Column .......................116
Tire and Loading Information Placard ...........250
TIREFIT ................................284
Tire Markings ............................244
Tires...................................80
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................261
Air Pressure ...........................254
Chains ...............................264
Changing .............................294
Compact Spare .........................259
General Information .....................254
High Speed ...........................257
Inflation Pressures .......................255
Jacking ...............................294
Life of Tires ...........................261
Load Capacity .........................250
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............266
Pressure Warning Light ...................162
Quality Grading ........................377
Radial ...............................257
Replacement ...........................262
Rotation ..............................265
Safety ...............................244
Sizes ................................245
Snow Tires ............................258
10
INDEX 393
Spinning .............................260
Tread Wear Indicators ....................261
Tire Safety Information .....................244
Towing ................................278
Disabled Vehicle ........................309
Recreational ...........................279
Traction ................................229
Traction Control ..........................237
Trailer Towing ...........................278
Transaxle
Autostick .............................227
Transmission
Automatic ............................214
Fluid ................................341
Maintenance ...........................341
Manual ..............................212
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .129
Transporting Pets ..........................74
Tread Wear Indicators ......................261
Trip Odometer ...........................164
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .......................27
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................27
Turn Signals .............................157
UCI Connector ...........................181
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................377
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .181
Universal Transmitter ......................129
Unleaded Gasoline ........................272
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................35
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................251
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage ...........................355
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............15
394 INDEX
Wait to Start Light.........................163
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .155
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ........................4
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................329
Washers, Windshield .......................112
Washing Vehicle ..........................344
Water
Driving Through ........................230
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................345
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................345
Wind Buffeting............................26
Windows ................................24
Power ................................24
Windshield Defroster .......................78
Windshield Washers .......................112
Windshield Wiper Blades ....................326
Windshield Wipers ........................112
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................326
10
INDEX 395
396 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be in-
stalled properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
batter y and fused as close to the battery as possible.The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent
to the negative battery connection.This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or
operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference be-
tween the communications equipment and the vehicles electronic
systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
2014 500L
14BF-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
500L
397


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Fiat 500L - 2014 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Fiat 500L - 2014 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 2,75 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Fiat 500L - 2014

Fiat 500L - 2014 User Manual - German - 440 pages

Fiat 500L - 2014 User Manual - Dutch - 436 pages

Fiat 500L - 2014 User Manual - French - 440 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info